Casio XJ UT310WN UT310WN_Users Guide Users AR
User Manual: Casio UT310WN_UsersGuide XJ-UT310WN | أجهزة الإسقاط | الدليل | CASIO
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 101
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
AR
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
XJ-UT310WN
ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ”ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ“ ﻭ”ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ً
ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ.
ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ.
http://world.casio.com/manual/projector/
1
ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ DLPﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Texas Instrumentsﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ.
ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ Microsoftﻭ Windowsﻭ Windows Vistaﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Microsoft
Corporationﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ HDMIﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ HDMIﻭ High-Definition Multimedia Interfaceﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ
ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .HDMI Licensing, LLC
ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ Mac OSﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Apple, Inc.ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ PJLinkﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ Crestronﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Crestron Electronics, Inc.ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ.
ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ AMXﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ AMX LLCﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ.
ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ XGAﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ IBM Corporationﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ.
ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ.
ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ .Independent JPEG Group
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ.
ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ،ﺳﻮﺍء ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ .ﻳُﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻷﻳﺔ
ﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ .CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺧﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ
ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ.
ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ
ﻋﻄﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ،ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺑﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ.
ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ .ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ً
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ.
2
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ 7 .......................................
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ 9 ..........................................................................
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ9 .....................................................................................
ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ 9 ...........................................................................................................
ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ10 ........................................................................
ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ 11 ....................................................................................
ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ 12 .................................................................................
ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ 12 ................................................................................
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ 13 ...................................................................
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ 13 .................................................................................
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ14 .................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ 14 .......................................................................................................................
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 15 ..........................................................................
ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ15 ..............................................................................
ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ16 ...................................................
ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ16 ............................................................................
ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ16 ...............................................................................
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ17 ....................................................................
ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ 17 ........................................................................................
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ 17 .............................................................
ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ18 .........................................................
ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ 20 .....................................................
ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ Windowsﻓﻘﻂ(21 ...................................................
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ 21 ....................................................................... USB
ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ 22 .......................................................................
ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ 22 .................................................................................
ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ 22 ................................................................................
ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ 23 ................................................. USB
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ25 ..............................................................................................................
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ25 ...........................................................................................
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ 26 ..................................................................................................... PDF
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ 27 ...................................................................................................
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ 27 .....................................................................................................
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ29 .......................................................................................................
ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ 29 ..............................................................
3
C
ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ 29 ....................................................................................................
ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ29 ...............................................................................................................
ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ29 .............................................................
ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ 29 ..........................................................................
ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ30 ..........................................................................................
ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ30 ......................................................................................
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ 32 ..............................................................................................................
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ 32 ............................................... USB
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ 33 .......................................
ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ34 ............................................................................
ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ35 ..............................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ EZ-Converter FAﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ PowerPointﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ECAﺃﻭ 36 ................................ PtG
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ PowerPointﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ 37 ........................................................... PtG
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ 39 ......................................................................... PtG
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ39 .................................................................
ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ PtGﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ39 .........................................................
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ 41 .............................................................. USB
ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ 41 ................................................................................... USB
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ 41 ....................................................................USB
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USBﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ 42 .....................................................
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ Mac OSﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USBﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ43 ...........................................
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USBﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ 45 .............................................
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ 46 ............................................................. Graphing
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ 46 .............................................................................. graphing
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ47 ............................................................
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ47 .....................................................................
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )47 ................................................................ (KEYSTONE
ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )47 ................................................................................... (D-ZOOM
ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )47 ................................................................................. (VOLUME
ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )48 .............................................................................................(VOLUME
ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً
ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻭﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )48 ....................................................................... (BLANK
ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )48 .............................................................................................(FREEZE
ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )48 ......................................................................................... (AUTO
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )49 .................................................................. (ASPECT
ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )50 ...................................................................................... (FUNC
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )50 .......................................................................................... (FUNC
4
ﻭﺿﻊ 51 ................................................................................... (ECO) Eco
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ 51 ..................................................................................................... Eco
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ )52 .......................................................... (TIMER
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ52 .........................................................................................................
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ 52 .........................................................................................
ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ 53 ...............................................................................................
ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ 53 .......................................................................................
ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ً
ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ 54 ....................................................................................
ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ 54 ..................................................................
ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ54 .......................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )55 ......................................................................(MENU
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ 55 ...........................................................................................
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ 56 ....................................................................................................
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ 61 .........................................................................
ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ61 .......................................
ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ 61 .................................................
ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ 62 ....................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ 62 ...............................................................................................
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ 63 ....................................................................................................
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ64 ................................................................................
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ 64 ..........................................................
ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ65 .......................................................................................
ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ65 .......................................................................................................
ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ 65 ................................................................................................
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ 66 ...........................................................
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ66 ...........................................................
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ66 .......................................................................................
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ66 ........................................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ67 ..................................................
ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ67 ...............................................................................................
ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ 68 .....................................................................
ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ70 ..........................................................
5
ﻣﻠﺤﻖ 72 ............................................................................
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ72 .........................................................................
ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ 73 ................................................. S-Video
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ 74 ........................................................MONITOR OUT
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ75 ..........................................................
ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ LOGOﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 75 .......................................................
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺘﺪﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ 75 ...............................................................
ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 76 .........................................................................
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ 77 ..................................................................
ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ 78 ...................................................................................
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ 81 ................................................................ RS-232C
ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ81 ................................................................
6
ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ
ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ LEDﻭﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ CASIOﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ٣١٠٠ﻟﻮﻣﻦ .ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ
ً
ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ.
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺯﺋﺒﻖ ،ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
RGBﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻭ S-videoﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ) (Y·Pb·Pr ،Y·Cb·Crﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ HDMIﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ.
ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ٦٠ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ١٢٠/ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ )RGB
ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ،ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ (S-video ،ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ.
• ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ) (YA-G30ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ .ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ً
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ) (CASIO 3D Converterﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
) RGBﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ( ﻫﻮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
• ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ HDMIﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ.
ﺩﻗﺔ WXGA
ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ (٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠) WXGAﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ .ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺫﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ.
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﻭﺿﻊ (Eco
ﻳﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
)ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻭﺿﻊ “Ecoﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(“(.
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ :ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ) (BMP ،GIF ،PNG ،JPGﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )،MOV ،AVI
(MP4ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ) (PtG ،ECAﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ .PDF
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ) USBﻋﺮﺽ (USB
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ
ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USBﻓﻘﻂ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ RGBﺃﻭ HDMIﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ
ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ Graphic Scientific
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ graphic scientificﻣﻦ CASIOﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ
ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ.
7
B
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ LANﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ*
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ LANﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ.
ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ LANﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ LANﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ً
ﻛﻼ
ً
ﻣﺘﺼﻼ.
ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ LANﺳﻠﻜﻲ*
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ LANﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ.
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ LANﺳﻠﻜﻲ*
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ LANﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ LANﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ
ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ .ﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ً
ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ LANﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ*
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ LAN
ﺳﻠﻜﻲ.
* ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،LANﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ.
8
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻀﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻭﺧﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ .ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ
ﻋﺮﺽ.
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ٦ﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء( ﻭﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( .ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ
٣٠ﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ
ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ .ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ
ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﻫﻮﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
9
ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ RGBﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ RGBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺁﺧﺮ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ S-videoﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ) “S-Videoﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(73
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
*٢
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMIﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ HDMIﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺁﺧﺮ.
*١
* ١ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ .USBﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (18ﻭ”ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) “USB Displayﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(41
* ٢ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ) USBﺻﻔﺤﺔ (22ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ graphic scientificﻣﻦ ) CASIOﺻﻔﺤﺔ (46ﺃﻭ
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ(.
ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ“ ،ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .72
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ RS-232Cﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
) “RS-232Cﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(81
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ
”ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(75
10
ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﻪ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ٥ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ )ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ(.
1
2
1
2
3
3
4
5
ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ
ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]) [Pﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ][INPUT
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(25
4
5
ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ.
11
B
ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ
ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ.
*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ.
.٢
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ
ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ.
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ
ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ) (+ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ )–( ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ.
ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء
ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ.
12
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ
ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ )ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 1
ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER IN 1ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 2
ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER IN 2ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ VIDEOﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
.AUDIO IN R/L
S-Video
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ S-VIDEOﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
.AUDIO IN R/L
HDMI
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ HDMIﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ :ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ .PDF
ﺃﺩﺍﺓ CASIO USB
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ graphic scientificﻣﻦ CASIOﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﻓﻲ
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺷﺒﻜﺔ
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ LANﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ LAN
ﺳﻠﻜﻲ
ﻋﺮﺽ USB
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Bﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
13
B
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[INPUTﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ”ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ“.
.٢
ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ:
ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،1ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،2ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،HDMI ،S-Video ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺛﻢ
ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ،ﻋﺮﺽ USB
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ
.١ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻋﺎﺭﺽ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٢ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺃﺩﺍﺓ CASIO USB
.١ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻋﺎﺭﺽ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٢ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺃﺩﺍﺓ “CASIO USBﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ
].[ENTER
ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ.
ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ“ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ USBﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ CASIO USB
ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
ﺷﺒﻜﺔ :ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ
ﻋﺮﺽ ” :USBﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ) “USBﺻﻔﺤﺔ (41
ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ” :ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (17
ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ” : CASIO USBﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ ) “Graphingﺻﻔﺤﺔ (46
ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠) WXGAﺑﻜﺴﻞ( .ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ
ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ،
ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻴﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻓﻌﻠﻲ“ .ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻓﻌﻠﻲ“ ،ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺤﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ
)ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،Aspect Ratioﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )“(ASPECT
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(49
14
B
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ
ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،ﻗﻢ ً
ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ) (YA-G30ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ) (CASIO 3D Converterﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ) RGBﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ( ﻫﻮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ HDMIﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.
ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ) RGBﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ(
ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ
ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ).(CASIO 3D Converter
– ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ CASIO 3D Converter
– ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ٦٠ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ١٢٠/ﻫﺮﺗﺰ
ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐS-video ،
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻘﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ DVDﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ.
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ٦٠ﻫﺮﺗﺰ
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (80ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺈﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ
ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ.
ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [INPUTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ (RGB) 1ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ (RGB) 2ﺃﻭ S-Videoﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ
].[ENTER
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ HDMIﺃﻭﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ CASIO USBﺃﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ USBﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ) 1ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ (2ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ) COMPUTER IN 1ﺃﻭ (COMPUTER IN 2ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ RGBﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ،ﻋﺪﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.
15
B
ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [INPUTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ،ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻴﻦ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ ،ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻌﻜﺲ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ.
ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
16
B
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USBﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ
ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ١*:
ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ
:JPEGﺣﺘﻰ ١٥ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )(baseline JPEG
ﺣﺘﻰ ٨ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )(progressive JPEG
ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ٦ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ٨ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ*٢
:PNG
:GIF
:BMPﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ٦ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ٨ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ٢٤ﺑﺖ(
ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ٦ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ٨ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ*٢
ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ٣*:
٢٠ :AVIﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺖ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ) ٣٠P/٧٢٠ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،MJPEGﺻﻮﺕ (ADPCM
٢٠ :MOVﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺖ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ) ٣٠P/١٠٨٠ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،H.264ﺻﻮﺕ ADPCMﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ (AAC
٢٠ :MP4ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺖ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ) ٣٠P/١٠٨٠ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،H.264ﺻﻮﺕ (AAC
ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ
ﻣﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ PtGﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ PDF
PDFﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ 1.4
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ٤*EZ-Converter FA
* ١ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ،٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤ﻋﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ .baseline JPEGﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ
،baseline JPEGﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠
GIF
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ .ﻳﺘﻢ
* ٢ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ PNGﻭ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ GIFﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ،ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ.
* ٣ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ
ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ،ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ.
* ٤ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ PowerPointﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) EZ-Converter FAﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ CASIOﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ( .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
EZ-Converter FAﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ PowerPointﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ECAﺃﻭ ) “PtGﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(36
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ :ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ،
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ،ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ .PDFﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ً
ﺃﻭﻻ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ
)ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻭﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ LANﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ( ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ.
ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ .USBﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ،LANﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ.
17
B
ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
) 8.1 ،8 ،7 ،Vista ،XP :Windowsﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻝ(
) 10.9 ،10.8 ،10.7 ،10.6 :Mac OSﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [MENUﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٤
ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ،“.ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ POWER/STANDBYﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ TEMP
ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ.
.٥
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]) [Pﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ POWER/STANDBYﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ TEMPﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ .ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
.٦
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻠﻬﺎ.
.٧
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USB-Bﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USB-Bﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”* “١ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ”ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(10
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻛﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ
ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”.“InternalMem
.٨
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ”.“InternalMem
:Windows
ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ” “AutoPlayﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ” .“Open folder to view filesﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ
ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ
ﻧﻘﺮﺍ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ” ،“AutoPlayﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ [Computer] [Start] :ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً
ً
”.“InternalMem
:Mac OS
ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ.
ﻧﻘﺮﺍ
ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ” “InternalMemﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ .Macﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً
ً
.٩
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ”.“InternalMem
18
B
.١٠
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ
”.“InternalMem
:Windows
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “Safely Remove Hardwareﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” .“USB Flash Driveﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”.“Safe To Remove Hardware
:Mac OS
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ” “InternalMemﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ .ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ
” “InternalMemﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ .Mac
.١١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
.١٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(20
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ
ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ً
ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ENTERﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٣ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ENTERﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٤ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء .ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ
ﻣﺮﻭﺭ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(62
19
B
ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ
.١
ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻠﻪ.
.٢
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[INPUTﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ”ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ“.
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻋﺎﺭﺽ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٤
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
.٥
ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ:
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ
”ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (25
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ PDF
”ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ) “PDFﺻﻔﺤﺔ (26
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ
”ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (27
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ
”ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (27
20
B
ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ Windowsﻓﻘﻂ(
*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ
ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ً
ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ . Macﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ USBﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ.
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ١ﺇﻟﻰ ٧ﻓﻲ ”ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ“
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(18
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ” “InternalMemﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ.
) (١ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ” .“InternalMemﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ”.“Format
) (٢ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ” “Formatﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”) “FAT32 (recommendedﻓﻲ ”“File system
ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ].[Start
) (٣ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ].[OK
) (٤ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ] [OKﻹﻏﻼﻗﻪ.
) (٥ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ] [Closeﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ.
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ USB
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ PDFﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ.
ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ
ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ FAT/FAT32ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ .USBﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ.
ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB
ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ USBﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ) USBﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﻛﺒﻴﺮ(
21
C
ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .USB
ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ،USBﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ USBﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
.١
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺑﻬﺎ.
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ) USBﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ (Aﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
.٤
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ.
ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ١ﻭ ٢ﻭ ،٤ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ.
22
ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ USB
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٥ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ .٢ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻓﻲ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.٢
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[INPUTﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ “ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ”.
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻋﺎﺭﺽ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٤
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
.٥
ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ:
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ” “Presentationﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ PDF
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ” “PDF Viewerﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ” “Slideﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ” “Movieﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ
.٦
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ١ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ،USBﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٨ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ .٧
.٧
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[FUNCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” “Drive Switchingﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ
].[ENTER
23
B
.٨
ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٥ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ:
Presentation
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٢ﻓﻲ ”ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(25
PDF Viewer
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٢ﻓﻲ ”ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ) “PDFﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(26
Slide
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٢ﻓﻲ ”ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(27
Movie
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٢ﻓﻲ ”ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(27
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ PDFﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺻﻞ USBﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ
ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ
] .[ENTERﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ.
ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ.
ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ” “NOUSBﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ )] .([ENTER] “Drive Switching” [FUNCﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢ
ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
24
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ.
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ
.١
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” “Presentationﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ) ECAﺃﻭ .(PtG
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ
]) [ENTERﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]
[(.
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ.
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ.
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ:
ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Wﺃﻭ ]
[.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Xﺃﻭ ]
[.
ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً
ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]
[.
[.
ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]
ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ
ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Sﺃﻭ ]
[
ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﺃﻭ ]
[.
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ
ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ
.١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[FUNC
.٢ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” “Page Selectionﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ
ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٤
ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ESC
.٥
ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [FUNCﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
25
B
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ PDF
.١
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” “PDF Viewerﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ .PDF
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ PDFﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ][ENTER
)ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]
[(.
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ PDFﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ.
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ.
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ .PDF
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ:
ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Wﺃﻭ ]
[.
ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Xﺃﻭ ]
[.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[FUNCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” “Adjust to Screen Widthﺛﻢ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[FUNCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” “Show Entire Pageﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ
ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ.
.١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[FUNC
.٢ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” “Page Selectionﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٣ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٤
ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ESC
.٥
ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [FUNCﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
26
B
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ
.١
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” “Slideﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ
].[ENTER
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ.
[ ً
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]
ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ENTERﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ.
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ.
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ.
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ:
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Wﺃﻭ ]
[.
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Xﺃﻭ ]
[.
ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ٩٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ*
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]
[.
ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ٩٠ﺩﺭﺟﺔ*
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]
[.
ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]
[.
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]
[.
* ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ JPEGﻓﻘﻂ.
.٤
ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ESC
.٥
ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [FUNCﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ
.١
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” “Movieﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ
] [ENTERﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]
[.
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ.
27
B
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ:
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ً
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ENTERﺃﻭ ]
[.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ )
( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ
ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ً
ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ.
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ
.١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[FUNC
.٢ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” “Play from Beginningﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﺧﻔﺎء
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[FUNCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ
” “Time Indicator On/Offﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ 2Xﺃﻭ 8Xﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ 32X
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Xﺃﻭ ]
[.
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 2Xﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ 8Xﻭﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ
ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ .32X
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 8X
ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 2Xﻭ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ .32X
ﻭ
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ 2Xﺃﻭ 8Xﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ 32X
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Wﺃﻭ ]
[.
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 2Xﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ 8Xﻭﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ
ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ .32X
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 8X
ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 2Xﻭ
ﻭ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ .32X
ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ENTERﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]
[ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ .ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً
ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ.
ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[FUNCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ
” “Go to Endﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ESC
.٤
ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ESC
.٥
ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [FUNCﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
28
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ
ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ.
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ
USBﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ PDFﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً
ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ.
ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[FUNCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” “Screen Formatﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ .ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .30
ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]
[ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]
[ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ.
ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ESC
ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[FUNCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” “Back to top menuﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
29
B
ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ.
ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ
.١
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” “Viewer Settingsﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”.“Viewer Setup
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ.
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ] [Wﻭ] [Xﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“.
.٤
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ٢ﺇﻟﻰ ٣ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
.٥
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ESCﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
30
B
ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ )*(.
ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
Display Sequence Setup
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.
):*File Names (Ascending
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.
):File Names (Descending
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.
):File Name Extension (Ascending
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ
ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.
):Time (New-to-Old
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ.
):Time (Old-to-New
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ.
Startup Mode
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ
ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ.
:*List View
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ.
:Icon View
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ.
Thumbnail View
:*Show
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.
:Hide
ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ.
Image Switching
:*Manual
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ.
:Auto
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ.
Slideshow Display
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ.
Interval
5 minutes ،1 minute ،30 seconds ،10 seconds ،*5 seconds
Slideshow Repeat
:Repeat
ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
:*Repeat Off
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
Movie Audio Output
:*Output
ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ.
:Do not output
ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
Initialize Viewer Setup
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ.
31
B
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ
.AUTORUNCﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ .AUTORUNC
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ AUTORUNCﻣﻮﺟﻮ ًﺩﺍ ﻫﻨﺎ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ:
ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ.
”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ :(59ﻣﻤﻜﻦ
”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 2ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ :(58ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ (USB
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”“Viewer Setup
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(30
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”) “AUTORUNCﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ
.USB
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ .١
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ” .“AUTORUNCﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ” “AUTORUNCﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ً
ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ،ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ
ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ” “AUTORUNCﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ
ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٣ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ.
.٣
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ” “AUTORUNCﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٢ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ” “AUTORUNCﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٢ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
32
B
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ١ﺇﻟﻰ ٨ﻓﻲ ”ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ“
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(18
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”) “AUTORUNCﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ
”) “InternalMemﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ(.
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ .٢
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ” .“AUTORUNCﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ” “AUTORUNCﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ً
ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ،ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ
ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ” “AUTORUNCﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٦ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ.
.٤
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.٥
ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻠﻪ.
.٦
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ AUTORUNCﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٣ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
33
ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ
ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ
ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ
ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ FATﺃﻭ .FAT32ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺇﻟﻰ FAT
ﺃﻭ .FAT32ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ
ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ .USB
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 2
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(58ﻓﻠﻦ
ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-A
ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“.
ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.
ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ٩٩٩ﻣﺠﻠﺪ
ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ.
ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺻﻞ USBﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ
ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ USBﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ.
ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ
ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ
ﺑﻲ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ،USBﻻ
ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ.
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USBﻛﺒﻴﺮ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
Viewerﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡ ً
ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡ )?( ً
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ.
ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ
ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ.
34
B
ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ
ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ
Folder does not contain any image
files.
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ .ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(17
This ECA/PtG file cannot be played
back.
ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ PtGﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ PtGﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
EZ-Converter FAﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻨﻪ.
Cannot display an image file.
ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ
ﻣﻦ ”ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(17
ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ
ﻣﻨﻪ.
This movie file cannot be played
back.
ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺫﻭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ
ﻣﻦ ”ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(17
ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ
ﻣﻨﻪ.
This PDF file cannot be displayed.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ PDFﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ
”ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(17
Internal Memory Access Error
ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ
١ﺣﺘﻰ ٨ﻓﻲ ”ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (18ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ
ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ”) “InternalMemﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ
ﺑﻚ .ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ” “InternalMemﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻓﻪ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ” “InternalMemﻧﻔﺴﻪ،
ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢ
ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ Windowsﻓﻘﻂ(“
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(21
Failure due to insufficient internal
memory capacity.
ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ١ﺣﺘﻰ ٨ﻓﻲ
”ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (18ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ
ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ”) “InternalMemﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ،
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ.
This file cannot be played back.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ
”ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ” )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .(17
Could not find an image file.
ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ
ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ.USB
35
C
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ EZ-Converter FAﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ PowerPointﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ECAﺃﻭ
PtG
ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ EZ-Converter FAﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ PowerPointﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،PtGﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻳﺪﻋﻢ EZ-Converter FAﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
2003 ،Microsoft Office PowerPointﻭ 2007ﻭ.2010
ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ،EZ-Converter FAﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ CASIOﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ
) (http://www.casio-intl.com/support/ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ.
ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ً EZ-Converter FA
ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ.
ﻋﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ،ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ PtG
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ PowerPointﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ.
•
•
•
•
ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ) OLEﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﻭﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ VBAﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ PowerPointﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ.
ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ PowerPointﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ PowerPointﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ”ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ
ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (39ﻭﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻪ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً
ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻭﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ENTERﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
EZ-Converter
FA
.ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ PowerPointﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ،ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﺃ ﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
ﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺏ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً
ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻭﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ENTERﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ EZ-Converter FAﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ً
ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ
ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ .ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ.
ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ:
ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ:
Windows XP
ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠ﺃﻭ ٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤ﺃﻭ ٧٦٨ × ١٢٨٠ﺃﻭ
.٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
Windows Vistaﺃﻭ
ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠ﺃﻭ ٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤ﺃﻭ ٧٦٨ × ١٢٨٠ﺃﻭ
.٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠
ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ Windowsﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ™.(Windows Aero
Windows 8
ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠ﺃﻭ ٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤ﺃﻭ ٧٦٨ × ١٢٨٠ﺃﻭ
.٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠
Windows 7
ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ PtGﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠) EZ-Converter FAﺃﻭ
٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤ﺃﻭ ٧٦٨ × ١٢٨٠ﺃﻭ (٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ) “PtGﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(39
36
B
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ PowerPointﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ PtG
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
2003 ،Microsoft Office PowerPointﺃﻭ 2007ﺃﻭ .2010
PtG
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ
ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ PowerPointﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺑﺪء ﻧﻈﺎﻡ .Windows
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ) USBﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ PtGﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ
ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ PtGﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ.
.٣
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .EZ-Converter FA
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ Windows Vistaﺃﻭ ،Windows 7ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
EZ-Converter FAﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ” .“User Account Controlﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ] [Allowﺃﻭ ].[Yes
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ .EZ-Converter FA
ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ
ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ
ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ
ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ
.٤
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ .PtGﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ “PtG
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(39
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ
”ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(39
.٥
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ .EZ-Converter FA
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ.
.٦
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ PowerPointﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ].[Open
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.
37
.٧
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻮﺻﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ
ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ
Input File
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ PowerPointﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ .٦ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ.
Output Drive
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ )ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USBﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ
ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ .٢ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ][T
ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ
ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ) ECAﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ (ECAﺃﻭ ) PtGﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ (PtGﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ
ﻫﻨﺎ.
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ
ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ )ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ( ﻣﻠﻒ PowerPointﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ .ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [Browseﻭﻗﻢ
ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ،ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ.
.٨
Output File Name
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ .ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ .PowerPointﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ.
ECA/PtG
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ )ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ.(ECA :
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ].[OK
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ PowerPointﻭﺑﺪء ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ .PtG
ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ” “Conversion complete.ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ PowerPointﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ٤ﺇﻟﻰ .٧
PtG
ECA
ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ،PtGﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(39
.٩
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ
.EZ-Converter FA
38
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ PtG
.١
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ .EZ-Converter FA
.٢
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”.“Output Resolution
.٣
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
ﺣﺪﺩ ٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠ﺃﻭ .٧٦٨ × ١٢٨٠ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠ﺃﻭ ٧٦٨ × ١٢٨٠ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ
.٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤
ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ،PtGﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤ﺃﻭ .٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠
ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ.
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ
.١
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ .EZ-Converter FA
.٢
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”.“Max Animation Display Time
.٣
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ(.
ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ١٠ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭ ٢٠ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ٣٠ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ٦٠ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ.
ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ PtGﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ
.١
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .EZ-Converter FA
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ .EZ-Converter FA
.٢
ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ .EZ-Converter FA
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﺭﻳﻦ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
.٣
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
.
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ.
39
.٤
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ECAﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ PtGﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ].[Open
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ:
ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
.
ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
.
ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ
ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ” “Slide Viewerﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ.
.١ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
.٢ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ].[OK
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ
ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ” “Exitﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ESCﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ” “Helpﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ.
40
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ USB
ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ USB
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ *USBﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ
ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USBﻓﻘﻂ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ RGBﺃﻭ HDMIﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ
ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
* ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ،USBﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Bﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ
٣٢) Windows Vista SP1 ،Windows XP SP3ﺑﺖ( ٣٢) Windows 7 SP1 ،ﺑﺖ ٦٤ ،ﺑﺖ( ٦٤) Windows 8/8.1 ،ﺑﺖ(
ﺃﻭ (10.9 ،10.8 ،10.7 ،10.6) Mac OS
ﻻﺣﻆ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ.
ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USBﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ .(USB 2.0) A
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ Windowsﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .USB displayﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
USB displayﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ Windowsﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻝ.
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USB
ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ )ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ Windowsﺃﻭ .Mac OSﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ
USBﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(45ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩً ،
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ.
41
B
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USBﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[INPUTﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ”ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ“.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻋﺮﺽ “USBﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ .USB
.٣
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ
USB-Bﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ.
ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USB-Bﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”* “١ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ”ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(10
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻛﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ
ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ” “USB_DISPLAYﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ.
ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ CASIO USB Displayﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ .ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ً
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ CASIO USB Displayﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Explorerﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ .USB_DISPLAY
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ” “Auto Playﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ) “USBﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(44
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ Windows
ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،Windowsﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء CASIO USB Displayﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ
ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ CASIOﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ
).(http://www.casio-intl.com/support/
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ:
ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) VACﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ Windows XPﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ
ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺰﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) VDDﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ Windows XP
ﻭ(Windows Vista
42
B
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ Mac OSﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USBﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[INPUTﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ”ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ“.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻋﺮﺽ “USBﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ .USB
.٣
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ
USB-Bﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ.
ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USB-Bﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”* “١ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ”ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(10
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ” “USB_DISPLAYﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ.
.٤
ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ” “USB_DISPLAYﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ.
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ
ً
.٥
ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ” “MAC_USB_Display_V2.pkgﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ
ً
ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ.
ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ CASIO USB Displayﻓﻲ .Dock
.٦
ﻓﻲ ،Dockﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ .CASIO USB Display
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،CASIO USB Displayﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ
ﺑﻚ .ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ) “USBﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(44
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ Mac OS
ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،Mac OSﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء CASIO USB Displayﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ CASIOﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ
).(http://www.casio-intl.com/support/
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ:
ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
Sound flower
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪ
Syphon-virtual-screen
43
B
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USB
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ CASIO USB Displayﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ:
ﺑﺪء )ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ( ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ
.
ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ
.
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ USB
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ
.
ﺑﺪء ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ*٣*١
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭﻩ.
ﻛﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ*٣*١
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” “Audio Outﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭﻩ.
ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ
”“Select the Projection Screen
”.“Main Screen
ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ*٣*٢
.ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ” “Audio Outﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ
.ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ
”“Select the Projection Screen
”.“Extended Screen
ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ CASIO USB Display
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ
ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ CASIO USB Display
) (١ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ .ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ.
) (٢ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ].[OK
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ .USB
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ CASIO USB Display
.
ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ” “Exitﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ
.ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ”.“About
* ١ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،Windows XPﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺰﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ) “Windowsﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(42
Windows
Vista
* ٢ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ .Mac OS 10.6ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ Windows XPﻭ
،ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ) “Windowsﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(42
* ٣ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ،Macﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ “Mac OS
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(43
44
B
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USBﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
.٢
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[INPUTﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ”ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ“.
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻋﺮﺽ “USBﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ .USB
.٤
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USB-Bﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ.
ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ CASIO USB Displayﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ CASIO USB Displayﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﻟﺪﻳﻚً ،
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ.
:Windows
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Explorerﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ .USB_DISPLAYﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ” “Auto Playﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ.
:Mac OS
ﻓﻲ ،Dockﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ .CASIO USB Display
45
B
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ Graphing
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ CASIO graphingﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USBﺑﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ CASIO graphingﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ.
)ClassPad II (fx-CP400
ClassPad 330 PLUS
fx-CG series
fx-9860G series
fx-9860GII series
fx-9750GII
GRAPH 95/85/85 SD/75/75+/35+
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ graphing
.١
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ graphingﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB-Aﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﺬ USBﺑﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ .graphing
.٢
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[INPUTﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ”ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ“.
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻋﺎﺭﺽ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٤
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺃﺩﺍﺓ “CASIO USBﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٥
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،graphingﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻣﻦ ً
ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
46
B
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )(KEYSTONE
ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [KEYSTONE +ﻭ]– [KEYSTONEﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ
ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ.
ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )(D-ZOOM
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[D-ZOOM
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
.٢
ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [D-ZOOMﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [D-ZOOMﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ( .ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [D-ZOOMﺇﻟﻰ
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ.
.٣
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Sﻭ] [Tﻭ] [Wﻭ] [Xﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ.
.٤
ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ESC
ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )(VOLUME
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [VOLUME +ﺃﻭ ]– .[VOLUME
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
.٢
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [VOLUME +ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]– [VOLUMEﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
.٣
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ESC
47
B
ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )(VOLUME
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [VOLUME +ﺃﻭ ]– [VOLUMEﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ“.
.٢
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
.٣
ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [VOLUME +ﺃﻭ ]– .[VOLUME
ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﻭﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )(BLANK
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[BLANK
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
”ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (57ﻭﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
.٢
ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]) [BLANKﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].([ESC
ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )(FREEZE
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [FREEZEﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [FREEZEﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ESC
ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )(AUTO
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[AUTO
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [AUTOﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ
ﻭﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ) (RGBﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 1ﺃﻭ ) (RGBﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .2
48
B
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )(ASPECT
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ASPECTﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ASPECTﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ASPECTﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ:
HDMI (DTV) ،Component ،Video
ﻋﺎﺩﻱ Letter Box I 4:3 I 16:9 I
) HDMI ،RGBﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(
ﻋﺎﺩﻱ Iﻛﺎﻣﻞ I 4:3 I 16:9 Iﻓﻌﻠﻲ
ﻭﺻﻒ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻋﺎﺩﻱ :ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
ﻛﺎﻣﻞ:
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،٩:١٦ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ.
:16:9
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ٩:١٦ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﻐﻄﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ٣:٤ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ .٩:١٦
ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ٣:٤ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ.
:4:3
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺤﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻓﻲ
ﻓﻌﻠﻲ:
ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء
ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ.
:Letter Boxﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ١٢٨٠ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ٨٠٠ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(77
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻓﻌﻠﻲ“ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ RGBﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ،SVGAﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ SVGAﺛﻢ
ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(57
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ASPECTﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ.
49
B
ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )(FUNC
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[FUNCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٢
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Wﻭ] [Xﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ.
.٣
ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ESC
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )(FUNC
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[FUNCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ .ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ )ﻟﻮﻥ
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ(.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ
].[ENTER
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ.
ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 1
.(56
.٣
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ
ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ESC
ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Ecoﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(51
50
B
ﻭﺿﻊ (ECO) Eco
ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ Ecoﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ
ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ،ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( :ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
:ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ،Ecoﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﺤﺠﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ،ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻭﺿﻊ Ecoﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ.
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ Eco
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ECO
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ”ﻭﺿﻊ “Ecoﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Wﻭ] [Xﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(“ ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ .٣ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ .٤
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ) “Ecoﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(.
1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ .Eco
2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Wﻭ] [Xﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ Ecoﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
.٤
ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ESC
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ،Ecoﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ .ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 1ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ) “Ecoﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(56
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺿﻊ Ecoﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ“،
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(15ﻟﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ .Eco
51
B
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ )(TIMER
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻋﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻭﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [TIMERﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ.
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ
ً
ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [TIMERﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [TIMERﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ً
ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
52
B
ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [TIMERﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ“ ﺃﻭ
”ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ:
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ“ ،ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Wﻭ] [Xﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
”ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ“” ،ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ“” ،ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ“” ،ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ“ )ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ:
ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ(.
ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ
ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ“ ،ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Wﻭ] [Xﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻣﺎ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“
)ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ :ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(.
ً
ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ،ﻳﻈﻞ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ESC
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ :ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ.
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ“ ،ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Wﻭ] [Xﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ٦٠ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ،ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ )ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ:
٢٠ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(.
.٣
ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ].[ESC
ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ
ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ENTERﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ESCﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [TIMERﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ.
.٢
ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ،٠٠:٠٠ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ٦٠ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﻣﻦ – ٠٠:٠١ﺇﻟﻰ – .(٦٠:٠٠ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ )ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ
ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ.
53
B
ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [TIMERﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ.
.٢
ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [TIMERﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ.
.٢
ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [TIMERﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ.
.٢
ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء“.
54
B
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )(MENU
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [MENUﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ
ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ(
ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(
ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ( ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ.
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ:
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[MENUﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [MENUﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Sﻭ] [Tﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ
ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[ENTERﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Sﻭ] [Tﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Wﻭ] [Xﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ] “[ENTERﺃﻭ ”ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ] “[ENTERﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ENTERﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
55
B
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻣﺜﻞ (RCVﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ .ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ )ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ( ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
:Rﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ :C ،RGBﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ :V ،ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ S-Videoﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ :H ،ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ) HDMIﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(،
:Dﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ) :F ،HDMI (DTVﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ :T ،ﺃﺩﺍﺓ :N ،CASIO USBﺷﺒﻜﺔ :U ،ﻋﺮﺽ USB
ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ً
ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺠﻤﺔ )*(.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 1
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 1
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 1
ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ )(V
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ .ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ
ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ.
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 1
ﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ )(V
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ .ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ
ﺇﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ.
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 1
ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )(V
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺮﺓ .ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ NTSCﺃﻭ .NTSC4.43
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 1
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ” :ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ*“” ،ﺭﺳﻮﻡ“” ،ﻣﺴﺮﺡ“” ،ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء“،
”ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ“.
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 1
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ” :ﺩﺍﻓﺊ“” ،ﻋﺎﺩﻱ*““ ،ﺑﺎﺭﺩ“.
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ً
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ redﻭ greenﻭ blueﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ.
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 1
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ Eco
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 1
ﻭﺿﻊ ،“Ecoﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻣﺎ ”ﺳﺎﻃﻊ“ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(
ﺃﻭ ”ﻋﺎﺩﻱ*“ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 1
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ “1ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ.
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 2
ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ )(RCV
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ.
ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ
ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ
ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 2
ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ )(RCV
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 2
ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ )(R
ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ RGBﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ،ﻷﻱ ﺳﺒﺐ،
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [AUTOﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 2
ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ )(R
ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ
ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ RGBﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
56
B
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 2
ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )(CVD
ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ٪٠ﺇﻟﻰ .*٪٥ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ
ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ .ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ
ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ٪٥
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ٪٠
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 2
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ “2ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ.
)(RCVD
ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )) “(VOLUMEﺻﻔﺤﺔ (47ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ.
ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء keystone correctionﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )(RCVHD
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ.
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )) “(ASPECTﺻﻔﺤﺔ (49ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ* :ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺧﻠﻔﻲ :ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻣﺘﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺘﺪﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ.
ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒً .
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ.
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ* :ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ .ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻔﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺷﻌﺎﺭ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (75ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺑﻼ* :ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ:
”ﺃﺯﺭﻕ“* )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء(” ،ﺃﺳﻮﺩ“ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء(” ،ﺷﻌﺎﺭ“ )ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ
ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(75
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]” :[BLANKﺃﺯﺭﻕ“* )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء(” ،ﺃﺳﻮﺩ“
)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء(” ،ﺷﻌﺎﺭ“ )ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(75
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(61
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ.
57
B
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ /COMPUTER1
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ COMPUTER2
)(RC
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ (V) Video
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ (V) S-Video
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER IN 1/COMPUTER IN 2
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ* :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
.COMPUTER IN 1/COMPUTER IN 2
:RGBﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER IN 1/COMPUTER IN 2ﻫﻲ
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ .RGB
ﻣﻜﻮﻥ :ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER IN 1/COMPUTER IN 2ﻫﻲ
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ.
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ VIDEOﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ .(S-VIDEO
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ* :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
:SECAM ،PAL60 ،PAL-N ،PAL-M ،PAL ،NTSC4.43 ،NTSC
ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً
ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ*( ﺃﻭ ﻻ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [INPUTﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ“ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 1
ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )(R
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ) RGBﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ( ﻭﺿﺒﻂ
ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ* :ﺗﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ.
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ :ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 1
ﻭﺿﻊ Eco
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ) “(ECO) Ecoﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(51
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 1
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ Auto Power Off
ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ،Auto Power Offﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ.
5ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ 10 ،ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ 15 ،ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ 20 ،ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ 30 ،ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ :ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ .Auto Power off
:Offﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 1
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(62
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 1
ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ )*ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ
ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 1
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻷﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺠﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ،
ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻜﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺳﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺘﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻹﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ،
ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺴﻄﺔ( ،ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ( ،ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﻳﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ
ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ
ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ،ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 1
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ “1ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 2
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ) ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ* :ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ .USB-A
ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻄﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 15
ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ.
58
C
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 2
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ*( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻂ(*.١
ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(
ﺷﺒﻜﺔ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(
ﻋﺮﺽ USB
ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
HDMI
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 2
ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ
* ١ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ،ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ AUDIO OUTﺑﻪ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ) ١٥٠٠ﺇﻟﻰ ٣٠٠٠ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻗﻠﻴﻞ .ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ.
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ* :ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﺣﺘﻰ ١٥٠٠ﻣﺘﺮ(.
ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ٣٠٠٠ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 2
ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (65ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 2
/RGBﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
COMPUTER IN 1ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ MONITOR OUTﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
AUDIO IN 1ﻭﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ MICﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ AUDIO OUTﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(.
ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ :ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ.
ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ* :ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ.
ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ“ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ AUDIO OUTﺃﺛﻨﺎء
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 2
ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ“ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER IN 2ﻭ AUDIO IN 2ﻣﻦ
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ MONITOR OUTﻭﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ AUDIO OUTﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 2
ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ )(V
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ* :ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ.
:CC4 ،CC3 ،CC2 ،CC1ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) CC1ﻭ CC2ﻭCC3
ﻭ.(CC4
ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ Keystone correctionﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 2
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ .ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ )“(TIMER
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(52
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 2
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ
ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ MICﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ) *0ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺇﻟﻰ ) 3ﺍﻟﺤﺪ
ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 2
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ “2ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ.
59
B
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ:
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ*( ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ .ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(32
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )(F
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [FUNCﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ )(RCVHD
ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(18
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ LANﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ.
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )(RCVHDFT
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ،ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ،ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ،ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ،
ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ،ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ،ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ )ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ROMﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ
ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ.
ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ
ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻋﺪﺍ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ،ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 1
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 1
ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ،
ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ،
ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ،ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ
60
B
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ،ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ.
ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [MENUﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٤
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ“ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ“.
.٥
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ]– [D-ZOOMﻭ] [D-ZOOM +ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ٪٨٤ﺇﻟﻰ .٪١٠٠
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ،٪١٠٠ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٦ﻭ ٧ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺇﺫﺍ
ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ،٪١٠٠ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٨ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء.
.٦
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ.
.٧
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Wﻭ] [Xﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ.
.٨
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ESCﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ
”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ“.
.٩
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [MENUﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ١ﺇﻟﻰ ٣ﻓﻲ ”ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ“.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٣
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Sﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
61
B
ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ
ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ،
ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ .ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (18ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ .ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻤﺪ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ”ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻭ”ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ“ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ.
ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ.
ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ
ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ.
ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ
ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ،ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ً
ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﻻﺣﻆ ً
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ...
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ،ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ CASIOﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺧﺼﻢ
ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻨﻚ.
.١ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ )ﺃﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺧﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(.
.٢ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ CASIOﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
ً
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ.
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ،
ﻋﺪﺍ Light Timeﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ.
ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻙ!
ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ .ﻧﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ
ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻙ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ.
62
B
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [MENUﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ “1ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
.٤
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ”ﻛﻠﻤﺔ“ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ،ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ
ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
][S] [T] [W] [X] [S] [T] [W] [X
.٥
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ.
.٦
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
.٧
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ٨ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺠﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ.
]،[D-ZOOM +] ،[VOLUME –] ،[VOLUME +] ،[ECO] ،[FREEZE] ،[BLANK] ،[MENU] ،[INPUT
]– ،[ASPECT] ،[AUTO] ،[TIMER] ،[X] ،[W] ،[T] ،[S] ،[KEYSTONE –] ،[KEYSTONE +] ،[D-ZOOM
][FUNC
.٨
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
.٩
ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ٧ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ
].[ENTER
ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ “.ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ESC
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ،٧ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ .“.ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ESCﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ .٧
63
B
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ١ﺇﻟﻰ ٥ﻓﻲ ”ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (63ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ.
.٢
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Wﻭ] [Xﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“.
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ
”ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ؟“ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ENTERﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ESCﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.٣
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [MENUﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
.١
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ١ﺇﻟﻰ ٥ﻓﻲ ”ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (63ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ.
.٢
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ“.
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Wﻭ] [Xﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“.
ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ
”ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ؟“ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ENTERﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ESCﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.٤
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [MENUﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
64
B
ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ
ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ )ﻗﻔﻞ( ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻋﺪﺍ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]) [Pﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( .ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ،ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻤﺪ.
ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ
.١
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [MENUﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.٢
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ “2ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٣
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ“.
.٤
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Wﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“.
.٥
ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ )ﻗﻔﻞ( ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻋﺪﺍ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]) [Pﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(.
.٦
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [MENUﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (68ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ESCﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Tﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ.“.
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ”ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ“ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ،٤ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [Xﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[MENU
65
B
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ .ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ
ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻳﺒﺮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ.
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ
ﻣﻦ ﻋﺼﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ.
ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ً
ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ.
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ
ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ.
ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ .ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ،ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻭﻛﻦ ً
ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ
ﺗﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ .ﻟﺬﺍ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﻨﺴﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ
ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ
ﻣﻔﺮﻁ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ.
ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ً
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻗﻢ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ.
66
ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ
ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ
ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ:
POWER/
STANDBY
LIGHT
ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ:
TEMP
z
z
z
ﺃﺣﻤﺮ
ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ
ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ
{
{
z
ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ .ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ :ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ.
ﺃﺣﻤﺮ
ﺃﺧﻀﺮ
z
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺣﻤﺎء ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
z
z
ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ
ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ
{
{
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ) Ecoﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(51
{
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ.
ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ Ecoﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(51
{
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ.
ﺃﺧﻀﺮ
z
z
ﺃﺧﻀﺮ
ﺃﺧﻀﺮ
{
ﺃﺣﻤﺮ
: 0ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣُﻀﺎء
:ﻳﻮﻣﺾ
: Oﻣُﻀﺎء
ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ POWER/STANDBYﻭ LIGHTﻭTEMP
ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ
ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ“ )ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(.
67
B
ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ESCﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ.
ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ/ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ
POWER
:ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
LIGHT
– :
TEMP
– :
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ
:ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ
ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ .ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺴﺪﺍﺩ.
POWER
:ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
LIGHT
– :
TEMP
– :
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ
:ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ
ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ .ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
POWER
:ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
LIGHT
:ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
TEMP
:ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ
:ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ .ﺳﻴﺘﻢ
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
POWER
:ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
LIGHT
– :
TEMP
:ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ
:ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ .ﺳﻴﺘﻢ
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
POWER
:ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
LIGHT
– :
TEMP
– :
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ
:ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ.
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ
ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ
ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
1ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ
ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(9
2ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(66
ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
1ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ
ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ “ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(9
2ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(66
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ
POWER/STANDBYﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﺇﺫﺍ
ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ
CASIOﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ.
ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ .ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ
POWER/STANDBYﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ( ﻭﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ،POWER/STANDBYﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ
ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ
ﺧﺪﻣﺔ CASIOﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ.
ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ
POWER/STANDBYﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ( ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ
ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ
ﺧﺪﻣﺔ CASIOﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ.
ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ
ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ
ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ
ﺧﺪﻣﺔ CASIOﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ.
68
B
ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ
ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ/ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ
POWER
:ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
LIGHT
– :
TEMP
– :
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ
:ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USBﺃﻭ
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ .LAN
POWER
:ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
LIGHT
– :
ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻬﺎ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء
ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً
ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ POWER/STANDBYﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ
ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ( .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ،POWER/STANDBYﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ
ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ
ﺧﺪﻣﺔ CASIOﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ.
ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ
ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ POWER/STANDBYﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ(،
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ .ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ً
ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ
ﺧﺪﻣﺔ CASIOﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ.
TEMP
:ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ
– :
POWER
:ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
LIGHT
:ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ
)ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ٠٫٥ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(
TEMP
:ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ
)ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ٠٫٥ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ
– :
POWER
:ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
LIGHT
:ﻣﻄﻔﺄ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ
TEMP
:ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ
)ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ٢ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ
– :
POWER
:ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ
LIGHT
– :
TEMP
:ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ
)ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ١ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ
– :
ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USBﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ LANﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USBﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ
.LANﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ
ﺧﺪﻣﺔ CASIOﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ.
ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ
POWER/STANDBYﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ( .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ
،POWER/STANDBYﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ
ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ
ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ
ﺧﺪﻣﺔ CASIOﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ.
ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
1ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ POWER/STANDBYﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ( ،ﻗﻢ
ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ.
3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ
ﺧﺪﻣﺔ CASIOﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ.
69
B
ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ
ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ
ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ POWER/STANDBYﻣﻄﻔﺄ ،ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ .ﻗﻢ
ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ TEMPﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ LIGHTﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ،ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ
”ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(68
ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ.
ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ
ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ.
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ 1) COMPUTER INﺃﻭ (2ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ VIDEOﺃﻭ
.S-VIDEO
ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ.
ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺊ )”ﻣﻜﻮﻥ“ ﺃﻭ ” (“RGBﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
)ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ COMPUTER2ﺃﻭ( ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ “COMPUTER1ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ .ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﻜﻮﻥ“ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ 1) COMPUTER INﺃﻭ (2ﻓﻲ
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ RGBﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ” “RGBﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ 1) COMPUTER INﺃﻭ (2ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
)ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ COMPUTER2ﺃﻭ( ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ .“COMPUTER1ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .58
ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ
ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .58
.١ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [MENUﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
.٢ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،HDMIﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [Tﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[ENTERﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ
ﺗﻜﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،HDMIﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [Tﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ].[ENTER
.٣ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [Sﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [ENTERﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ.
.٤ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ] [Tﻭ] [Sﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ
].[ENTER
.٥ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [MENUﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ
ً
ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ][VOLUME
ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ] [Wﻭ] [Xﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .47
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻻ ﻳُﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﻱ
ﺻﻮﺕ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ.
ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ AUDIO INﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(10
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ HDMIﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ، USBﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻟﺨﻂ“
ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 2
ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ“ ﺇﻟﻰ
”ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ“ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .59
ﻟﻮﻥ ﻏﺮﻳﺐ
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [BRIGHTﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [COLOR MODEﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ.
– ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 1
ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ“ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
70
C
ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ
ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ
”ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ“.
ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ
ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ) .ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ (.RGBﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] [AUTOﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ.
ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ“
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 2
ﻭ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 2
ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ“) .ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ (.RGBﺍﻧﻈﺮﺻﻔﺤﺔ .56
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ” ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 1
ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ
ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ] .[ENTERﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .62
ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ.
ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ.
ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﻠﻨﻔﺎﺩ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ.
ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ
ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ TEMPﺃﻭ LIGHTﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(68
ﺃﻭ ﻣُﻀﺎء.
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻲء.
ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ
ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ CASIOﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ ،ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ .ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ،ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ
ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ CASIOﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ.
ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ.
.١ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ١٠ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ.
.٢ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ
ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ CASIOﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ.
71
B
ﻣﻠﺤﻖ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﺗﺮﺩ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ Y·Cb·Cr :ﺃﻭ .Y·Pb·Prﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ
ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )ﺃﺧﻀﺮY :؛ ﺃﺯﺭﻕCb/Pb :؛ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ.(Cr/Pr :
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ.
ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ.
ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭﻱ
ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ
)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ(
ﺃﺣﻤﺮ
ﺃﺑﻴﺾ
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ AUDIO IN 2
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ
ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ
ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER IN 2
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER IN 1
ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ(
72
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
AUDIO IN 1
ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ S-Video
ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ) S-videoﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ(
ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ S-VIDEO
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ
S-video
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ/ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺃﺣﻤﺮ :ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ AUDIO IN R
ﺃﺻﻔﺮ :ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ
VIDEO
ﺃﺑﻴﺾ :ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ/ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ
)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ(
AUDIO IN L
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ S-VIDEOﺃﻭ VIDEOﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ .AUDIO IN L/R
73
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ MONITOR OUT
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ MONITOR OUTﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
COMPUTER IN 1ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER IN 2ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ .ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ
ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ MONITOR OUTﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ:
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
:MONITOR OUT
ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ1
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER IN 1
ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ2
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER IN 2
ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،HDMI ،S-Video ،ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ،
ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ،CASIO USBﺷﺒﻜﺔ ،ﻋﺮﺽ USB
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 1ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮً ،2
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻵﺧﺮ
ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ )ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER IN 1ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ *.(COMPUTER IN 2
* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 1ﺇﻟﻰ ،S-Videoﻓﺴﻴﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
* MONITOR OUTﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ .COMPUTER IN 1
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER IN 1ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
،MONITOR OUTﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ AUDIO IN 1ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
،AUDIO OUTﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ .ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ” ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ 2
/RGBﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(59
74
B
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ
ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ LOGOﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USBﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ( ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ .USB
ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ LOGOﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ LOGOﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
ﻣﻨﻔﺬ LOGO
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USBﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ USBﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ LOGOﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ
ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻔﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ
” “User Logo Transfer Guideﻭ” ،“Projector Firmware Update Guideﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ CASIOﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺘﺪﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺘﺪﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺘﺪﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ
ﻭﺇﻧﺬﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ .ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺇﺳﺎءﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽً .
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ،ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ
ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ.
ﻣﺘﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ “
ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ” ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (57ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“.
75
B
ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
h
L
ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻗﻄﺮﻱ
)ﺳﻢ(
ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
)ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(:
) Lﺳﻢ(
ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ:
) hﺳﻢ(
٥٠
١٢٧
٦
٢٤
٦٠
١٥٢
١٣
٢٧
٨٠
٢٠٣
٢٧
٣٢
١٠٠
٢٥٤
٤٠
٣٨
١١٠
٢٧٩
٤٧
٤٠
76
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ RGB :ﺃﻭ ) HDMIﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﻋﺎﺩﻱ
ﻛﺎﻣﻞ
4:3
16:9
ﻓﻌﻠﻲ
(٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠) SVGA
(٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤) XGA
(٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠) WXGA
(١٠٢٤ × ١٢٨٠) SXGA
ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ Video :ﺃﻭ componentﺃﻭ (DTV) HDMI
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﻋﺎﺩﻱ
16:9
4:3
Letter Box
ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ٣:٤
ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ
ﺻﻮﺭﺓ Letter Box
ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ٩:١٦
77
B
ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ
ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ
ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ RGB
VESA
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ )ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
٦٠/٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠
٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠
٣١٫٥
٦٠
٧٢/٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠
٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠
٣٧٫٩
٧٣
٧٥/٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠
٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠
٣٧٫٥
٧٥
٨٥/٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠
٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠
٤٣٫٣
٨٥
٥٦/٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠
٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠
٣٥٫٢
٥٦
٦٠/٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠
× ٨٠٠
٦٠٠
٣٧٫٩
٦٠
٧٢/٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠
٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠
٤٨٫١
٧٢
٧٥/٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠
٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠
٤٦٫٩
٧٥
٨٥/٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠
× ٨٠٠
٥٣٫٧
٨٥
٦٠/٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤
٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤
٤٨٫٤
٦٠
٧٠/٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤
٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤
٥٦٫٥
٧٠
٧٥/٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤
٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤
٦٠٫٠
٧٥
٨٥/٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤
٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤
٦٨٫٧
٨٥
٧٥/٨٦٤ × ١١٥٢
× ١١٥٢
٨٦٤
٦٧٫٥
٧٥
٦٠/٧٦٨ × ١٢٨٠
٧٦٨ × ١٢٨٠
٤٧٫٨
٦٠
٦٠/٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠
٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠
٤٩٫٧
٦٠
٦٠/٩٦٠ × ١٢٨٠
× ١٢٨٠
٦٠٫٠
٦٠
٦٠/١٠٢٤ × ١٢٨٠
١٠٢٤ × ١٢٨٠
٦٤٫٠
٦٠
٧٥/١٠٢٤ × ١٢٨٠
١٠٢٤ × ١٢٨٠
٨٠٫٠
٧٥
٨٥/١٠٢٤ × ١٢٨٠
١٠٢٤ × ١٢٨٠
٩١٫١
٨٥
٦٠/٧٦٨ × ١٣٦٦
٧٦٨ × ١٣٦٦
٤٧٫٧
٦٠
٦٠/١٠٥٠ × ١٤٠٠
١٠٥٠ × ١٤٠٠
٦٥٫٣
٦٠
٦٠/٩٠٠ × ١٤٤٠
٩٠٠ × ١٤٤٠
٥٥٫٩
٦٠
٦٠/١٢٠٠ × ١٦٠٠
١٢٠٠ × ١٦٠٠
٧٥٫٠
٦٠
٦٠/١٠٥٠ × ١٦٨٠
١٠٥٠ × ١٦٨٠
٦٥٫٣
٦٠
٦٠٠
٩٦٠
78
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ
HDTV
SDTV
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ )ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
1080p/50
٥٦٫٣
٥٠
1080p/60
٦٧٫٥
٦٠
720p/50
٣٧٫٥
٥٠
720p/60
٤٥٫٠
٦٠
1080i/50
٢٨٫١
٥٠
1080i/60
٣٣٫٧
٦٠
576p/50
٣١٫٣
٥٠
576i/50
١٦٫٦
٥٠
480p/60
٣١٫٥
٦٠
480i/60
١٥٫٧
٦٠
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ )ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
NTSC
١٥٫٧
٦٠
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ
NTSC4.43
١٥٫٧
٦٠
PAL
١٥٫٦
٥٠
PAL-M
١٥٫٧
٦٠
PAL-N
١٥٫٦
٥٠
PAL60
١٥٫٧
٦٠
SECAM
١٥٫٦
٥٠
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ HDMI
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ )ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
٦٠/٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠
٣١٫٥
٦٠
٦٠/٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠
٣٧٫٩
٦٠
٦٠/٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤
٤٨٫٤
٦٠
٦٠/٧٦٨ × ١٢٨٠
٤٧٫٨
٦٠
٦٠/٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠
٤٩٫٧
٦٠
٦٠/٩٦٠ × ١٢٨٠
٦٠
٦٠
٦٠/١٠٢٤ × ١٢٨٠
٦٤
٦٠
٦٠/١٠٥٠ × ١٤٠٠
٦٥٫٣
٦٠
)SDTV (480p
٣١٫٥
٦٠
)SDTV (576p
٣١٫٢٥
٥٠
)(٥٠) HDTV (720p
٣٧٫٥
٥٠
)(٦٠) HDTV (720p
٤٥
٦٠
)(٥٠) HDTV (1080i
٢٨٫١٣
٥٠
)(٦٠) HDTV (1080i
٣٣٫٧٥
٦٠
)(٥٠) HDTV (1080p
٥٦٫٢٥
٥٠
)(٦٠) HDTV (1080p
٦٧٫٥
٦٠
79
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ(
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ RGB
ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ S-video
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ )ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(
٦٠/٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠
٣١٫٥
٦٠
١٢٠/٤٨٠ × ٦٤٠
٦١٫٧
١٢٠
٦٠/٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠
٣٧٫٩
٦٠
١٢٠/٦٠٠ × ٨٠٠
٧٧٫٢
١٢٠
٦٠/٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤
٤٨٫٤
٦٠
١٢٠/٧٦٨ × ١٠٢٤
٩٨٫٨
١٢٠
٦٠/٧٦٨ × ١٢٨٠
٤٧٫٨
٦٠
١٢٠/٧٦٨ × ١٢٨٠
٩٧٫٤
١٢٠
٦٠/٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠
٤٩٫٧
٦٠
١٢٠/٨٠٠ × ١٢٨٠
١٠١٫٦
١٢٠
NTSC
١٥٫٧
٦٠
80
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ RS-232C
ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ RS-232Cﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )(RS-232C
٩ D-Subﺳﻨﻮﻥ )ﺃﻧﺜﻰ(
٩ D-Subﺳﻨﻮﻥ )ﺃﻧﺜﻰ(
ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ*
ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ(
81
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ
ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ
ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
١٩٢٠٠ﺑﺖ/ﺙ
ﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ
٨ﺑﺖ
ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ
ﺑﻼ
ﺑﺖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ
١ﺑﺖ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ
ﺑﻼ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ
ﺃﻣﺮ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ
)>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ<؟(
)>ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ<>،ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ<(
) ? ( VOL
ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
4
) ( 0 - 30 , 15
ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ.
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ
ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ
)>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ<>ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ<(
) ( VOL 0
ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
4
ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ) ٠ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(.
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ“ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ.
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ASCIIﻭﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ.
ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡ )?( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻪً .
ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ،ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻳﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻠﻪ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ً
ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
82
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ :ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ
ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ :ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ
ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.
:Rﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ :Wﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ
RW
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ:
PWR
RW
:0ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ :1 ،ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ:
:0ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER 1ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER 1ﺇﻟﻰ .RGB
:1ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER 1ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER 1ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ.
:2ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ .Video
:3ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER 2ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER 2ﺇﻟﻰ .RGB
:4ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER 2ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER 2ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ.
:6ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER 1ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER 1ﺇﻟﻰ .Auto
:7ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ .HDMI
:8ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ .Network
:9ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ .S-video
:10ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER 2ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ COMPUTER 2ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ.
:11ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ.
:12ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ .USB Display
:13ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ .CASIO USB Tool
SRC
RW
:1 ،RGB1 :0ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ،1
:2ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ،RGB2 :3 ،
:4ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ،2
،(RGB/Component) Auto1 :6
:8 ،HDMI :7ﺷﺒﻜﺔ،
،S-Video :9
،(RGB/Component) Auto2 :10
:11ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ،
:12ﻋﺮﺽ ،USB
:13ﺃﺩﺍﺓ CASIO USB
:Blank Screenﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ.
BLK
RW
:0ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ :1 ،ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ :ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
VOL
RW
0ﺇﻟﻰ 30
:Color Modeﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ.
PST
RW
:1ﺭﺳﻮﻡ :2 ،ﻣﺴﺮﺡ،
:3ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ :4 ،ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء،
:5ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ
:Aspect Ratioﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.
ARZ
RW
:0ﻋﺎﺩﻱ،16:9 :1 ،
،Letter Box :3 ،4:3 :2
:4ﻛﺎﻣﻞ :5 ،ﻓﻌﻠﻲ) 4:3 :6 ،ﺇﻟﺰﺍﻣﻲ(
ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ :ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
LMP
R
:Eco Modeﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ .Eco Mode
PMD
RW
83
-0ﻭﺣﺪﺓ :ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ
،(Normal) Off :1 ،(Bright) Off :0
،(Manual 1) On :3 ،(Auto) On :2
،(Manual 2) On :4
،(Manual 3) On :5
،(Manual 4) On :6
(Manual 5) On :7
B
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ
RW
:Freezeﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ.
FRZ
RW
:0ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ :1 ،ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
:Keystone Correction
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ ”ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ“ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
Keystone Correction –60 :0
Keystone Correction 0 :60
Keystone Correction +60 :120
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 65 :ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ .Keystone Correction +5
KST
RW
0ﺇﻟﻰ 120
KSP :+
–KSM :
W
0ﺇﻟﻰ 120
ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ :ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ.
KEY
W
،X :4 ،W :3 ،T :2 ،S :1
،FUNC :10 ،ESC :6 ،ENTER :5
،POWER :12 ،MENU :11
،INPUT :14 ،AUTO :13
،ASPECT :16 ،TIMER :15
،FREEZE :18 ،BLANK :17
،KEYSTONE + :20 ،ECO :19
KEYSTONE –، :21
،D-ZOOM + :22
،D-ZOOM – :23
،VOLUME + :24
،VOLUME – :25
) :26
(،PLAY
،REWIND( ) :27
،FORWARD( ) :28
،PREVIOUS( ) :29
NEXT( ) :30
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ :ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ
ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
:0ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ*١
:1ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ*٢
:2ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ*١
:3ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ*٢
POS
RW
0ﺇﻟﻰ 3
:APOﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ) Auto Power Offﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ
.(Auto Power Off
APO
RW
:0ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ،5 minutes :1 ،
،15 minutes :3 ،10 minutes :2
30 minutes :5 ،20 minutes :4
ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ :ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
STS
R
:1 ،Normal :0ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ،
:2ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ،
:7ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ :16 ،ﺧﻄﺄ ﺁﺧﺮ
VLP :+
–VLM :
W
0ﺇﻟﻰ 30
–:Keystone Correction +/
ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ keystone correctionﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ .١
– :Volume +/ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ .١
84
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
B
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ
RW
ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ :ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
MUT
RW
:0ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ :1 ،ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ .MIC
MIC
RW
0ﺇﻟﻰ 3
* ١ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ
* ٢ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ
85
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
GPLﻭLGPL
) (١ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ( ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ) GNU General Public License (GPLﻭﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ
ً
ً
LGPL
GPL
،ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ
ﻭ
) .GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPLﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻜﻼ ﻣﻦ
ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ .ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻳﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ
.CASIOﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﻪ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ GPLﻭ.LGPL
) (٢ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ”ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ“ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﺮﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ
ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(.
) (٣ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ GPLﻭ LGPLﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ً
ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻬﺎ.
86
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to
most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program whose authors commit to
using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public
License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses
are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge
for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change
the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to
ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that
there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on,
we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced
by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free
use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
87
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright
holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”,
below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the
Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or
a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each licensee is
addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been
made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and
to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based
on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is
derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it,
when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty
(or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the
Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based
on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
88
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are
not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works
in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute
them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a
work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part
regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely
by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective
works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a
work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the
other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the
following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge
no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machinereadable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1
and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding
source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with
Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For
an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains,
plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and
installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need
not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source
along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under
this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void,
and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received
copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
parties remain in full compliance.
89
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so,
and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based
on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program
subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’
exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason
(not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions
of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the
Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the
Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you
could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right
claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices.
Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through
that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest
of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that
distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public
License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of
this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms
and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any
version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
90
10.If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted
by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make
exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11.BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION.
12.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE
OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR
DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR
A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH
HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
91
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best
way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these
terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each
source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
“copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program’s name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) yyyy name of author
This program is
modify it under
as published by
of the License,
free software; you can redistribute it and/or
the terms of the GNU General Public License
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome
to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’
for details.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the
General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than
‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your
program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a
“copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
interest in the program ‘Gnomovision’
(which makes passes at compilers) written
by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If
your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary
applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License
instead of this License.
92
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts
as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence
the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it.
You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary
General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations
below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software
(and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you
can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you
can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or
to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the
recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and
recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this
license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library.
Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what
they have is not the original version, so that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by
problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make
sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive
license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the
library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
93
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License.
This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is
quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order
to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of
the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General
Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom.
The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s
freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less
of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the
ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in
certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a
certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be
allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used
non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we
use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of
people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in
non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its
variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that
the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that
program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention
to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former
contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to
run.
94
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice
placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the
terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed
as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently
linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under
these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
included without limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a
library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of
the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from
such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent
of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library
does and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive
it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this
License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on
the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above,
provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this License.
95
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is
invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does
not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its
purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely
well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application
does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are
not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute
them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a
work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part
regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely
by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective
works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a
work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other
work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License
to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so
that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a
newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you
can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not
a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object
code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it
with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under
the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to
distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along
with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the
Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in
isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
96
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a
derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses
the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for
distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the
object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the
work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and
small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is
unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object
code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work
under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library”
with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under
terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s
own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the
Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work
during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library
among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do
one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the
Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the
complete machine-readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so
that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing
the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files
in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified
definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one
that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system,
rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a
modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interfacecompatible with the version that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the
materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing
this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent
this user a copy.
97
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and
utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the
materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or
binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries
that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use
both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library
together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined
library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other
library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library,
uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the
Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so,
and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on
it.
10.Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject
to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’
exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
parties with this License.
11.If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason
(not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions
of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the
Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the
Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you
could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
98
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right
claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices.
Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through
that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest
of this License.
12.If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may
add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is
permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13.The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of
this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms
and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version
ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14.If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions
are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15.BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE
OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA
BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH
HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
99
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we
recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by
permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General
Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of
each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the library’s name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C) year name of author
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Lesser General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a
“copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in
the library ‘Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written
by James Random Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That’s all there is to it!
100
MA1603-C
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V4.4 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Print high-res Author : CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. Create Date : 2016:03:16 19:10:38+09:00 Modify Date : 2016:03:17 16:35:07+09:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows) Creator Tool : Adobe InDesign CS5.5 (7.5) Metadata Date : 2016:03:17 16:35:07+09:00 Format : application/pdf Title : XJ-UT310WN Creator : CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. Document ID : uuid:fbe9f1fa-04c6-479a-bfac-55f2c80e7e6f Instance ID : uuid:64ace793-d457-49d9-988c-77c34958c95f Page Layout : OneColumn Page Count : 101EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools